JP2022000070A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine displays imparted quantity display regarding an imparted quantity of a game value imparted by entry of a game medium into variable winning means at a lapse of a predetermined period after the variable winning means is changed from a second state to a first state when a first round game is performed from among plural round games. Predetermined display corresponding to non-impartation of a game value as imparted quantity display is displayed at a lapse of a predetermined period when a game medium does not enter the variable winning means within a predetermined period, and specific display differing from predetermined display is displayed as an imparted quantity at a lapse of a predetermined period when a game medium enters the variable winning means within a predetermined period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-11

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a gaming machine, when a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area by a launching device and the gaming medium wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area and an execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied. Pachinko that enhances the game's interest with a so-called variable display game in which multiple types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display result. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the player is in an advantageous state (big hit game state). In the big hit game state, the round game in which the big winning opening is open can be repeatedly executed up to a predetermined upper limit number of times.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the opening of the large winning opening is earlier than the timing of switching the display of the number of rounds (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-104625

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the possibility of winning a prize in the large winning opening is increased when the gaming medium is fired before the number of rounds is displayed, the number of balls to be obtained is preferably obtained. From the viewpoint of displaying the above, it is still not sufficient, and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy and the game interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in the interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times while being controlled to the advantageous state. CPU 103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means is
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). It is possible to display a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design (for example, an image display device 5).
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game is performed among the plurality of round games, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed (for example, acquisition) without displaying the predetermined display as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period. Display "0015" without displaying "0000" as a number display),
Moreover,
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 14-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 14-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player. Further, when the specific display is displayed, the predetermined display is displayed without being displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the gaming interest from being lowered. Further, since a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect, these displacements can be displayed. The specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of the specific image is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, an image displayed on an image display device (display means) is broken at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-141396. There was something that could perform a splattering effect (specific effect). However, in such a game machine, since the effect is simply that the image is broken and scattered, the effect is improved by executing the effect in the state where other images are displayed on the image display device. However, in this case, it is necessary to create dedicated image data for each image displayed on the image display device in order to execute the effect, and the amount of data to be stored in the storage means is large. There is a problem that the image may become excessively large, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 14-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 14-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of the state which a game ball is sandwiched by a special variable winning ball device. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in the image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a time saving loss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example in an effect control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a layer. It is explanatory drawing of the generation of the displacement image when the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the application example of the displacement image to the displacement target image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of VRAM. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table 1. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display image processing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the generated image and the area which can be displayed by an image display apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a time-saving state. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the development suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the revival effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the revival effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the resurrection effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display color of the crack effect image in the revival effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the look-ahead notice effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the promotion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image generated in the modification, and the area which can be displayed by an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop notification effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the display of the stereoscopic image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the notice effect during variable display and the development suggestion effect in a modification. It is explanatory drawing when this invention is applied to the slot machine in the modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of an ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 in a lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in an upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in a lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in an upper right portion. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R portions corresponding to the speakers 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided at a position below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left side display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. There is. Further, a lamp 9g in the vicinity of the general winning opening is provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. When the movable body lamp 9d, the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, speaker lamp 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. There is. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until one of the earlier timings. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big hit game state, a so-called right-handed hit may be performed in which the game ball is launched into the game area on the right side so that the game ball is won in the big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed in the special figure of "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special map, the probability determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special map display result as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 are set. In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the rate at which the gaming ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as advance notice effects are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of balls to be acquired after a predetermined period in which the attacker is in the open state in the first round game, and the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of balls won has not increased is displayed, and if the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which includes a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d. , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, etc. It is a figure. In the feature portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d. , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), game effect lamp 9 such as general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, lights in sequence from lower left to lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he should hit right by letting him hit.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It should be stored in. After that, the jackpot flag is cleared and the state is turned off (step 042AKS004). In addition, settings are made to end the probabilistic change state and the time saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn off the state, a process of clearing the special figure fluctuation number counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the like are performed. It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of a small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, the setting for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made in the same manner as the process of step 042AKS003 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared and the state is turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

If the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). .. After executing any of the processes of step 042AKS011 and step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the probability change state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation count counter (special figure fluctuation count value) is updated by, for example, 1 subtraction or 1 addition, and the updated special figure fluctuation count value is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability change state or the time reduction state may be terminated and controlled to the normal state by clearing the probability change flag or the time reduction flag to turn off the state. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag may be maintained, and the process of step 042AKS013 may be terminated. After executing the end determination of the probability change state or the time saving state, the special symbol stop process ends. It should be noted that the end determination based on the special figure fluctuation count value may be performed only when the time is shortened, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit". .. Alternatively, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the RAM 102 and referring to a probability change state end determination table stored in ROM 101 or the like in advance, the probability change state is terminated. It may be decided whether or not to do so.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the big hit opening pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state corresponding to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start effect is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process in step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit is set. Set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, it is determined that the jackpot start effect is waiting in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, "0"). , Corresponding to the match, it may be determined that the player is not waiting for the production at the start of the big hit.

If the jackpot start effect is waiting in step 042AKS022, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value (step 042AKS023), the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the big hit start effect is not waiting in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the big hit start flag is cleared (step 042AKS024) and the big winning opening opening count counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read out (step 042AKS026), and an open control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, a common open control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. For example, when there is a jackpot type of "probability", a jackpot of "probability change" or "non-probability change" is set. It may be set to an open control pattern different from the type. Further, even if the jackpot type is "probability variation" or "non-probability variation", different opening control is set according to the jackpot type, for example, the opening control pattern is set differently depending on the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2". It may be set in the pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting for opening the large winning opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next open waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next open wait end is being waited for. If this is the case, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for opening next time. If the next opening standby is in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process proceeds to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 10-2, or the post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 of FIG. The time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not waiting (step 042AKS027; No), the large winning opening is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large winning opening opening counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning prize by setting a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening time in the game control process timer. The large winning opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for opening the mouth, is set. Further, for example, when the solenoid drive signal for the predetermined large winning opening door is started to be output via the predetermined solenoid circuit, the solenoid for the large winning opening door for opening the large winning opening is turned on. The state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value in the large winning opening opening counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is the game control process timer. Is set to.

Then, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a designated command during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After the processing of step 042AKS029 is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the processing during the opening of the big hit while updating by adding 1 to the count value of the number of times the big winning opening is opened (step 042AKS030). After updating to 5 ”(step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening is completed.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the process during the opening of the big hit. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the jackpot by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If there is no winning of the game ball in the large winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if there is a winning of the game ball to the big winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates by adding 1 to the winning number count value, and the game ball is the big winning opening. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value is not a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is subtracted by 1 and updated (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the large winning opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process of opening the large winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045. (Step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, to close the large winning opening by stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal for the predetermined large winning opening door solenoid via the predetermined solenoid circuit. The solenoid for the large winning door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the designated command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is set after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6", which is a value corresponding to the processing (step 042AKS049), the processing during the jackpot opening process is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the big hit opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 10-3, the big hit opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, etc. (including the big hit opening post-processing and the big hit end process). Is executed to set transmission of various production control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning opening open designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning opening post-opening designation command. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the effect control command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , The timing of each timing such as the start of the big hit, the opening (start of the round) and the closing of the big winning opening (the end of the round), the winning of the big winning opening and the end of the big hit, etc. is grasped.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed in the jackpot middle effect processing of step S176 of FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). The hit end designation command is executed when it is determined in the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 of FIG. 6 that the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the big hit middle effect and executing the ending effect.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (the nR predetermined period has elapsed). Determination (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1", which is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066 described later, and cleared to "1" in step 042AKS066. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and when the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nth round. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the big prize opening is completely open (it is detected that the big winning door has moved to the position where it is completely open). The designated command during the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted, and the timer value counting for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game of the first round, the number of acquired balls is displayed and the number of rounds is indicated. The display is done. On the side of the production control board 12, during the period from the big hit to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending), each time a prize designation command indicating that the game ball has won a prize is received in the big prize opening, the number of acquisitions is obtained. Is continuously added by 15. When the effect control board 12 receives the prize designation command, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the number of acquisitions, and display the added number of acquisitions. It takes a predetermined period to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be in time for the winning from the start of the round game of the first round until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of acquisitions. , Even though the prize is won, the process of displaying "0015" may not catch up (it becomes "0015" after "0000" is displayed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, 0.6 seconds is provided as a predetermined period, and when the game ball existing in the upper part of the large winning opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period in which "0015" is directly displayed without displaying "0000" as the number of acquisitions is secured. On the other hand, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when continuously firing, and the period from firing to winning the big winning opening is set. Even if it is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously fired game balls to win a prize in the large winning opening is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the big winning opening is one from the opening of the big winning opening to the display of the number of winnings. Therefore, by increasing the number of winnings in the state before the number of acquisitions and the number of rounds are displayed, it is possible to prevent the number of acquisitions from being displayed at the timing when the number of rounds display is started and to give the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although an example is shown in which the predetermined period in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the first nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is set to "1", and 1 is sequentially added in the process of step 042AKS066, and "1" in step 042AKS068. It is cleared to. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n = 1 by confirming the value of n.

When it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect suggesting that the player should hit right, and suggests that the player is in a big hit game state. The operation of the fanfare effect is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R, displays the number of acquisitions, and displays the number of acquisitions, and the n-1R. The operation control of the big hit middle effect is performed (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the acquisition number display are performed, and the operation control of the big hit middle effect corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and predetermined music and sound are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production to output is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS056). In the process of step 042AKS056, the winning is determined from the start of the nR to the predetermined period. If the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when the winning opening is won by the predetermined period from the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the count value of the number of winning balls. Is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the process of step 042AKS057 or the process of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of balls won is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive villa, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time reduction control ends without the variable display result becoming a "big hit", that is, at the end timing of the consecutive villa. .. After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). It should be noted that the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is, for example, more than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the big hit medium effect (winning prize). It emits light in an aspect of notifying that it has been done. Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest. As for the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of light emission per unit time may be larger at the time of winning and at the time of the big hit middle production. When a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period, and a winning sound is output. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (1st R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). ). If n = 1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated as they are. On the other hand, if n ≠ 1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the update display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the acquired number of balls added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as it is, but is shown in FIG. 10-. As shown in 12 (a-23), a display for counting up (notification display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls to be acquired increases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. And, at the same time, the operation control of the big hit middle effect of the nR is performed (step 042AKS061). When n = 1, that is, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a prize before the lapse of a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed in the step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is added by "15" in step 042AKS057. Therefore, in step 042AKS061, FIG. 10-11 (a-20). ) Is displayed to count up (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), the number of acquisitions has not increased in this big hit. Display the number of acquisitions (display of "0015") different from the predetermined display indicating You can do it after the up). On the other hand, if the game ball has not won a prize in the big winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in this big hit. Therefore, FIG. 10-11 (a). As shown in -22), as a predetermined display, the number of acquisitions (display of "0000") indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased is displayed (if the villa is in a row, the number of acquisitions at the time of the previous big hit remains the same. Display it). In addition to "0000" as the acquisition number display (predetermined display) indicating that the acquisition number has not increased, a display other than a number such as "---" or "not increased" is performed. You may do so. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production to output is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance. In this way, during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in the situation where the number of winnings is not displayed, only the attacker lamp 9c lights up when the game ball wins the large winning opening. However, in the situation where the acquisition number is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period, the effect lamp 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately alternated. The effect lamp 9 emits more light than during the predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and after the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production and improve the entertainment of the game. Further, since the effect lamp 9 is emitted at the same timing as the execution timing of the big hit middle effect, the effect can be excited at once at the timing when the big hit medium effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS063). The attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light, the winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, the count-up is displayed (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. The number of acquisitions is updated. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or when the winning designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), has the effect control CPU 120 started the next round n + 1R of the nR? It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined whether or not a designated command during opening of the large winning opening indicating the start of the n + 1R is received from the side of the main board 11. When the n + 1R has not started, that is, when the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening has not been received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. .. On the other hand, when the first n + 1R is started, that is, when a designated command indicating the start of the first n + 1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), after adding "1" to n (step 042AKS066), various display processes are performed. To finish. For example, when n = 1, that is, in the first round, n = 2 in step 042AKS066. Although n = 2 and it is the second round, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053 until the predetermined period elapses, and it corresponds to the first round which is n-1R in step 042AKS055. The round display is performed, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, the round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (displayed in the process of step 042AKS061 after being determined as Yes in step 042AKS052).

When it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the big hit middle effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS051). 042AKS067), clear n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and end various display processes.

Subsequently, display timings such as round number display and acquisition number display and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. In the illustrated example, the case where it is a so-called first hit (first big hit) is shown, not in the consecutive villas.

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the large winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot gaming state is set. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (b-1), the large winning opening is closed. Further, in order to notify the player that a big hit has occurred, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-1), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamp 9eL, Various effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the lamp near the general winning opening 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When it becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect are performed to notify the player that the player should hit right until the predetermined period of the first round ends (Fig. 10-). Step 042AKS054 of step 5). The period from the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6 to the start of the first R is a sufficiently longer period than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2), the effect image of the fanfare is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-2). All effect lamps 9 are turned off once. Then, the effect lamp 9 is turned on in the order of the lower left side, the upper left side, the central portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and the right-handed effect of displaying "right-handed" on the image display device is performed. The small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2) may be continuously displayed during the big hit game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (a-3) to 10-10 (a-19), in the image display device 5, the "right-handed" image is superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamp 9 will be described below. When the right-handed effect is started, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided in the lower left of the game area is first lit, and then FIG. 10-7 (Fig. 10-7). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 in the game board 2, the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is lit, and then the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is turned on. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, is lit, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion is lit. 9eL lights up. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), since the large winning opening is closed, the launched game medium does not win the large winning opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the launched game ball passes through the second path of the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the upper center portion of the game board 2 is turned on, and FIG. 10-8 (c-9). ), The main lamp 9 at the upper position of the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on, so that the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper center portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

Next, the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), and then the frame lamp in the upper right portion is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11). The upper right lamp 9bR2, which is 9, is lit, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), the right side display device of the display device lower lamp 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2. The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1 which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part is lit, and the attacker lamp 9c provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 is lit. do. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the effect lamp 9 lights up in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the central part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side, so that the effect lamp 9 hits the player right. Right-handed production will be performed to suggest. In this example, both the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest right-handed striking. May be. Further, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights from the lower left side to the center and the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights from the lower left side to the center and right. Both may be lit independently at the same time or with a time lag, such as lighting in the downward direction.

After the right-handed effect of the effect lamp 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). As shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed (the right-handed effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the opening timing of the large winning opening is reached as shown in FIG. 10-6, the first R is started, and the large winning opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed, and is shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period elapses. As such, all effect lamps 9 remain off (same until FIGS. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indexes such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set to be lower than usual. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the big winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9. As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence to suggest right-handed striking. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the opening of the large winning opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be increased). Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest right-handed hitting, after the last turned on attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). You may leave it on as it is without turning it off. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big winning opening has been opened.

Then, when the large winning opening is completely opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), the count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R is started, and FIG. 10-10 is taken. As shown in (b-18), when the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12. It should be noted that the large winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the large winning opening is opened). If it exists at the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R. On the side of the effect control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18) by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, and FIG. 10-10 (c-18). As shown in the above, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that a prize has been won. As described above, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c is, for example, emitted in a manner larger than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light in the big hit medium effect. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. An example is shown. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the game interest is lowered without giving the player anxiety. Can be prevented.

After the game ball has won the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), or without winning from the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), time has passed, and FIG. 10- After a predetermined period has elapsed as shown in 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19), as shown in FIG. 10-6, the number of rounds corresponding to the first R and the jackpot medium effect are displayed. Since the execution timing is set and the acquisition number display is executed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the first is as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20). The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed and "BOUNUS" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. Although the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot and the display of "BOUNUS" displayed as the jackpot medium effect (1st R medium effect) are omitted (the same applies to FIGS. 10-20 described later), the figure is shown. It is displayed in a mode suggesting that it should be hit right as shown in 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed effect is performed and a predetermined period elapses after the big winning opening is opened, the big hit medium effect is shown in FIG. 10-21. As shown in (A-2), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is displayed in a front-facing manner, and is displayed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is tilted toward the right back, and "in BOUNUS" is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the upper part of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, faces the front, and a star is placed above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. The image of the shape shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is tilted toward the left back, and "U" in the "BOUNUS" display is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the top of. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot again, faces the front, and a star is placed above the "S" in the display of "BOUUNUS". The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, in the jackpot middle production, the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot are operated in the right-back direction, front, and left-back direction, and a star-shaped image is displayed from the left character of the "BOUNUS middle" display to the right. It suggests to the player that he should hit right by shifting. The operation display of the decorative pattern that constitutes the jackpot and the transition display of the star-shaped image are called effect display. In addition to this, for example, a predetermined image is rotated clockwise or the character is gradually displayed. Includes indications such as pointing to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed striking. According to this, it is suggested that the right-handed hit should be made by the effect display, and the right-handed hit can be easily recognized.

In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the effect lamp 9 is turned on according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is turned on after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as a big hit middle effect (first R middle effect), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed, "BOUNUS in" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

Next, as time elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball wins the big winning opening in the first R, the upper limit at which the big winning opening can be opened. It will be a period. Along with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and FIG. 10-12 (a-24). As shown in, the number of acquisitions of "0150" is displayed. Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big hit middle effect, FIG. 10-12 (c-23). ), The attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that a prize has been won. It should be noted that the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and 28.9 seconds even after a predetermined period has elapsed. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, it is a sufficiently possible period to win 10 prizes. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize opening in the 1st R, the maximum winning opening can be opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-24), the big winning opening is open. It is controlled to be closed. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the large winning opening is controlled to be completely closed until the second R shown in FIG. 10-6 is started. On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R elapses (from the time when n = 2 to the elapse of the predetermined period), as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-25), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed. , The big hit middle production is continuously performed (the winning number display is updated and displayed according to the winning), and the production effect lamp 9 corresponds to the big hit middle production as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25). Lights up.

In the 1st R, when the 10th game ball wins the big prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game ball is controlled. In some cases, a so-called over-winning may occur in which the player wins a prize in the large winning opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of acquired "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed until the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that the over-winning has occurred in the first R, and the game entertainment can be improved. In addition, since the update of the acquisition number display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the acquisition number display in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine which prize corresponds to the opening of the round. It will be easy. Further, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning sound may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, the over winning sound may be output when the winning value exceeds the upper limit "10". Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a mode corresponding to over-winning, unlike the light emission in the normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, the timing is such that the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-6, and the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). Is controlled to be. At this time, it is determined as Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 10-5, that is, a designated command during opening of the large winning opening indicating the start of the n + 1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n = 2. Become. At this stage, since the process of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the jackpot medium effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the first R are performed. The display is made (see also Figure 10-6).

Next, when the big winning opening is completely opened and the game ball wins the big winning opening as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), the step in FIG. 10-5 is different from the case of the first R. In the process of 042AKS060, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the acquisition number display of "0165" is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). Further, along with the winning, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the effect effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 10-13 (c-27). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up. As described above, in the rounds other than the 1st R, the number of winnings is updated and displayed during the predetermined period even if the prize is won during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second R elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 of FIG. 10-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), "2R" indicating that the second round is performed. The number of rounds is displayed, and the big hit middle production corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number of "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed. Further, in the feature unit 042AK of this embodiment, an example of executing a common big hit medium effect regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the effect effect lamp 9) is shown, but it is executed in each round. The production during the big hit may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the effect lamp 9. In this way, since the large winning opening is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the player's game ball that has been continuously fired from the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning a game ball fired continuously to the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large winning opening is controlled to be open corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 10-13 (a-29). ), (B-29), and (c-29), when a predetermined period has passed without the game ball winning after the large winning opening is completely opened, FIG. 10-14 (a-31). ), (B-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions acquired in the first R is continuously displayed as it is. After that, the same processing is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the hit end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. Set to end. In this way, for the second and subsequent rounds, if the prize is not won during the predetermined period, the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round is continuously displayed, while the prize is won during the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of acquired balls to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

For example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R A game ball wins. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the winner has been won, and after the lapse of the predetermined period, FIGS. 10-11 (a-20) and FIG. As shown in (a-21), after performing the count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquired number display. Further, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will further win a prize during the predetermined period (the second ball may win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period has elapsed, FIG. 10-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed without displaying "0000" or "0015" as the acquisition number display. According to this, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the hobby of the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions by the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened and the first round is started. Then, if the game ball does not win the big winning opening within the predetermined period after the first round is started, a predetermined display indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased is performed after the predetermined period. If the game ball wins a large prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the number of acquisitions is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving a feeling of anxiety to the player.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the first round is started, the effect control CPU 120 directly specifies the number of acquisitions of "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as a notification display that the number of acquisitions increases when the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the first round is started. , Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the special winning opening opening designated command transmitted from the main board 11 side in response to the opening of the large winning opening. Is started, and the number of acquisitions is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period. According to this, since the predetermined period is appropriately counted and the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 closes the large winning opening door, so that the launched game ball passes through the second path of the upper part of the large winning opening door and leads to the discharge path. By opening the winning opening door, the launched game ball is guided to the large winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. .. According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the game is enjoyed without giving the player anxiety. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 is right-handed as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3) between the time when the big hit and the time when the big winning opening is opened. By performing the production, the player is informed that he / she should hit right. According to this, since the game area to be launched during the big hit is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the large winning opening is a state in which the large winning opening is completely open, that is, the large winning opening is moved to a position where the large winning opening is completely open. A command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted from the side of the main board 11 in response to the detection that the vehicle has moved to a completely open position. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the big winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) that was launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the big winning opening is open). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R, and if a prize is won within the predetermined period, the effect control CPU 120 is specified after the predetermined period. The number of acquisitions is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game ball hit early from being wasted.

Further, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the first R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the first R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the first R. The winning of the game ball occurs, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions as a specific display after the lapse of the predetermined period. According to this, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the big hit game state has been reached from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening. Then, after the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of winnings, and it is possible to execute the big hit middle production corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is used when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. As shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp is also shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and it is possible to visually recognize that the prize has been won within the predetermined period. It will be easier.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), for example, a unit of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the big hit medium effect. Light is emitted in a mode that is greater than the number of light emission per hour (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won). According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is concerned when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. Outputs the winning sound corresponding to the winning. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the first and subsequent rounds in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the round is started. conduct. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of the multiple round games, the game can be prevented from deteriorating. It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, when the round game after the second round is performed, if the game medium does not win the big prize opening within a predetermined period after the big winning opening is opened, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the winning number display displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed, while the game medium wins the big winning opening within the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of winning balls given in response to the winning from the winning number display displayed in the previous round game, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30). According to this, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even after the second round.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays, for example, a count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) even when an over-winning occurs, and displays the number of acquisitions of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed until the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. According to this, since the update of the acquired number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquired number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a game as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18) during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed. Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball wins the big prize opening, in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) or ( As shown in c-21), the effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after that and improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round, and even after the big winning opening is opened, a predetermined period of time is reached. As shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence to suggest right-handed movement until the elapse of the predetermined period. As shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), for example, the effect lamp 9 provided in the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect effect provided in the game board 2. The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handedness by using the effect lamp 9. Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on to suggest right-handedness after the large winning opening is opened, after the last turned on attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Instead of turning off the lights, the lights may be turned on as they are. According to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

Further, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of winnings is displayed. In addition, the effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is emitted after the acquisition number display after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Let me. According to this, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect control CPU 120 emits the effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the big hit medium effect after the elapse of a predetermined period. Let me. According to this, it is possible to excite the production at once at the timing when the big hit middle production is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 suggests right-handed display of an effect display in which a decorative pattern or a star-shaped image constituting a big hit is transitionally displayed at the timing when the acquired number is displayed. Perform in an embodiment. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the right side, and the player can easily recognize that the player should hit the right side.

(Modification example of feature part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), it is suggested that the effect lamp 9 should be turned on in order to hit right. An example is shown in which all the effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed effect by the effect lamp 9 is completed, but this is an example. For example, after the state shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), (c-15), FIGS. 10-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), (c-16A). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (c-16A) at the timing (FIG. 10-16 (b-16A)) when the state shifts to the state shown in the above and the large winning opening is opened, the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7. The attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, the player can easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be continuously lit until a predetermined period elapses or during the opening period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big winning opening is closed, the display of "1" in the display of "1R" is erased. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed, and the round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings that is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit winning number is 10), but for example, the upper limit winning is set to 1. , If two pieces are entered during the predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over prize may be given. In this case, as the over-winning winning sound during the predetermined period, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over-winning sound) may be output, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over-winning. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, an example of counting the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is shown for displaying the number of acquisitions, but in addition to this, the winning to the general winning opening 10 during the big hit is also counted. May be good. Since right-handed hits are made during the big hit, the general winning opening for winning is the general winning opening 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 during the big hit. The same part as in FIG. 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the prize designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), a general prize indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the general prize opening 10 is further obtained. It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS081; Yes). Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS059. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Further, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether or not the general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS083; Yes). Step 042AKS083), the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (step 042AKS085). Even when the acquisition number update display in step 042AKS085 is performed, the acquisition number display is performed after the count-up display (notification display that the acquisition number increases) is performed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS065. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. (A-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in FIG. 10-19 are shown in FIG. 10-10 (. The same applies to a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, the count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball wins the general winning opening 10, the state shifts to the states shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 as shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-17), the game ball is also generally used in the large winning opening. When the time elapses without winning the winning opening 10 and the predetermined period elapses as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball wins a general prize. When a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A). , The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit medium effect (1st R medium effect), as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed and "BOUNUS" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. In the big hit medium effect, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the effect effect lamp 9 is turned on according to the light emission pattern preset according to the big hit medium effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquisition number display.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the general winning opening 10, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-22A), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as a big hit middle effect (first R middle effect), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed, "BOUNUS in" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

As described above, even when the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined setting is the same as in the above embodiment. After the lapse of the period, "0003" is displayed as the number of acquisitions in response to the winning of the general winning opening 10. If the game ball does not win in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball has not been awarded. Therefore, even for the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, the number of winnings corresponding to the winning is displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 042AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times while being controlled to the advantageous state. CPU 103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means is
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game is performed among the plurality of round games, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, "0015" is displayed instead of displaying "0000". Display etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means performs a count-up display indicating that the game value is given, and then the display means is given as the specific display. Display according to the game value (for example, display "0015" after performing a count-up display that is a notification display that the number of acquisitions will increase).
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The display means starts displaying the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period after receiving the command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, on the main board 11). Starting counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing when the specified command is received while the large winning opening is open),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is appropriately counted and the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The variable winning means passes through the first path (for example, by opening the large winning opening door, the launched game ball is passed through the first path) that guides the game medium to the winning path by being in the first state. (For example, leading to the big winning opening) and the second path leading the game medium to the discharge path in the second state (for example, by closing the big winning opening door, the launched game ball is made large. A route forming means including a second path of the upper part of the winning opening door to lead to a discharge path, and a detecting means formed in the winning path to detect the winning of the game medium (for example, the count switch 23). Etc.), including,
The time from the path forming means to the detection means of the game medium is within the predetermined period (for example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23). Time is configured to be 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big prize opening is detected within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball is detected within a predetermined period without giving anxiety to the player. It is possible to prevent the decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means becomes the first state, an operation promotion display for promoting the operation is performed to the player (for example, the big winning opening is opened after the big hit. In the meantime, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3), a right-handed effect is performed to indicate to the player what should be right-handed, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, the open state of the large winning opening means that the large winning opening is completely opened. That is, the main board 11 is in a state where the large winning opening door has been moved to a position where it is completely opened, and corresponds to the detection that the special winning opening door has been moved to a position where it is completely opened. A designated command is sent from the side while the big winning door is open),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
When the game medium launched by performing the operation promotion display wins the variable winning means before the first round game in the advantageous state is started, the specification is made after the lapse of the predetermined period. Display the display (for example, a game ball launched by performing a right-handed effect before the start of the 1st R can win a prize at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and the prize is won within the predetermined period. If so, the number of acquisitions will be displayed as a specific display after a predetermined period),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medium launched before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
In the final round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the advantageous state is held with the game medium sandwiched when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state. Finished (for example, in the final round, the eleventh game ball was sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large winning door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15). The jackpot game state ends in the state),
In the first round game when the advantageous state is controlled again, the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, so that the game medium in the sandwiched state wins the variable winning means. In this case, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening at the start of the first R in the case of the next big hit, and the number of acquisitions as the specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed. Display etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is controlled to the advantageous state and suggests that the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, a big prize). From the closed state to the open state of the mouth, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the game is in a big hit game state.) It is possible to execute the round game display that can identify the round game and the effect during the round corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large winning opening is open and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of acquisitions. It is possible to perform a big hit medium production corresponding to round games, etc.),

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 043AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 043AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 043AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times while being controlled to the advantageous state. CPU 103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means is
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game is performed among the plurality of round games, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
Light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9) and
A light emitting control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the light emitting means is further provided.
The light emission control means has won a prize in the game medium when the game medium wins the variable winning means after the lapse of the predetermined period and when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period. The light emitting means is controlled by the light emitting pattern corresponding to (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the prize is won within the predetermined period. Becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when the game medium wins the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the specific light emitting means). For example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c) and
When the game medium wins the variable winning means, the light emission of the specific light emitting means has a larger number of light emission per unit time than the light emission of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (step). The same applies to 042AKS064), in a mode that is greater than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the big hit production (such as in a mode of notifying that a prize has been won).
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.)
The sound output means is
When the game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output.
Even if the game medium wins the variable winning means after the lapse of the predetermined period or the game medium wins the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period, the winning sound is output (for example, the game to the large winning opening). When the ball wins, the winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning is within the specified period),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation of means relating to feature part 044AK)
The feature portion 042AK includes the following feature portion 044AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 044AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times while being controlled to the advantageous state. CPU 103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means is
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
It is possible to display a round game display that can identify the round game being executed (for example, display the number of rounds).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the given amount display and the first after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. The round game display corresponding to the round game is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of rounds is displayed and the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened).
When the second and subsequent round games are performed among the plurality of round games, the second and subsequent times after the predetermined period elapses after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. The round game display corresponding to the round game is displayed (for example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened).
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games. , It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the second and subsequent round games are performed, if the game medium does not win the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , The grant amount display displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed (for example, within a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened when the second and subsequent round games are performed). If the game medium does not win the big prize opening, the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31)),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the second and subsequent round games are performed. , From the grant amount display displayed in the previous round game, the grant amount corresponding to the game value given in response to the winning is added and displayed (for example, the game medium is displayed within a predetermined period). When a prize is won in the large winning opening, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the winning balls given in response to the winning from the winning number display displayed in the previous round game. Add numbers and display, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The display means can update and display the grant amount display being displayed in response to the game medium winning the variable winning means.
The update display of the grant amount display ends once the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state and then ends until the first state is changed again (for example, the large winning opening is completely closed). After that, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-winning will be completed within the period before the open state corresponding to the 2nd R),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, since the update of the acquired number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquired number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning. ..

(Explanation of means related to feature 045AK)
The feature portion 042AK includes the following feature portion 045AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 045AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times while being controlled to the advantageous state. CPU 103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means is
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game is performed among the plurality of round games, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
With multiple light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9),
A light emitting control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the light emitting means is further provided.
In the light emission control means, the variable winning means is in the first state when the variable winning means is in the first state and the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. Control is performed so that the light emitting means emits light more than when the imparted amount display is not displayed before the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, during the predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the acquired number display is not performed, FIG. 10- As shown in 10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the pachinko ball wins the big prize opening, but in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the effect lamp 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used. Turn on the lights alternately to emit more light from the effect lamp 9 than during the specified period),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after the event is performed and improve the entertainment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
It is possible to display an operation promotion display for promoting the operation to the player (for example, right-handed display) after the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means becomes the first state.
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when the game medium wins the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the specific light emitting means). For example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c) and
When the variable winning means is in the first state, when the given amount display before the lapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, the predetermined light emitting means corresponds to the operation promotion display while causing the specific light emitting means to emit light. The light is emitted in a light emission pattern, and when the given amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the big winning opening). After being opened, the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period elapses to suggest right-handed strikes. After the lapse of a predetermined period, for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the effect lamp 9 and the gaming board 2 provided in the frame 3 for the double gaming machine are provided. When the effect lamps 9 are turned on alternately and the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, the figure is shown in the figure. Do not turn off the lights as shown in 10-9 (c-15), but leave them on as they are),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the round game, one round game is completed when a specific number of game media wins, and the game shifts to the next round game (for example, when 10 game balls win a prize, the big winning opening is opened. It will be the upper limit period that can be done, etc.),
The time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means enters the second state is a sufficient time for the gaming medium to win the specified number (for example, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened). Is a sufficient period to count after a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the round game, one round game is completed when a specific number of game media wins, and the game shifts to the next round game (for example, when 10 game balls win a prize, the big winning opening is opened. It will be the upper limit period that can be done, etc.),
The time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means enters the second state is a sufficient time for the gaming medium to win the specified number (for example, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened). Is a sufficient period to count after a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted when the given amount display before the predetermined period elapses is not displayed, and the given amount display after the predetermined period elapses. After the display, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of winnings is displayed, FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19). ), The effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect is displayed after the acquisition number display after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Make the lamp 9 emit light, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is controlled to the advantageous state and suggests that the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, a fanfare effect). (For example, it is possible to execute), and at the same time as the display of the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is started, it is possible to execute the round game display that can specify the round game being executed and the effect during the round corresponding to the round game. (For example, the number of rounds is displayed, the number of wins is displayed, and the big hit production is performed after a predetermined period of time).
The light emitting means is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the round (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the timing is the same as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit. (For example, make the effect lamp 9 emit light),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production is executed during the round, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
Further equipped with a general winning means (for example, a general winning opening 10) in which a game medium can win a prize,
The display means is
The amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the general winning means can be displayed as the given amount display (for example, the winning number display is displayed corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening 10). Etc.),
When the game medium does not win the general prize means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period). If the game ball does not win in the general winning opening 10, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball has not been given),
When the game medium wins the general winning means within the predetermined period, a display corresponding to winning the general winning means is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the large winning opening is open). If a game ball wins in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after that, "0003" is displayed as the number of acquisitions in response to the winning in the general winning opening 10 after the lapse of the predetermined period. Etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, even when a prize is won in the general winning means during a predetermined period, the display corresponding to the winning in the general winning means is displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the game area on the right side).
The display means is
The first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a big hit) can be displayed at the same timing as the addition amount display.
The first image is displayed as an effect at the same timing as the applied amount display in the advantageous state (for example, an effect display for operating a decorative pattern constituting a big hit is performed).
The effect display is displayed in a mode suggesting the predetermined area (for example, as an effect display, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot is operated in the right-back direction, the front, and the left-back direction to display the effect display in a mode suggesting right-handed striking. Such),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the effect display suggests a game area to be fired, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game area to be fired.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is a display means (for example, an image). A variable winning means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control instructing the display content on the display device 5), a first state in which the game medium is easy to win, and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win. (Special variable winning ball device 7 and the like) and a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when controlled to the advantageous state. The display means includes a control means (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game) capable of executing the game a plurality of times, and the display means has a display area capable of displaying an image, and the game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the display area). For example, it is possible to display a display image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I or the second interface image 006SG005J) of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and a small symbol whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbol. (For example, the image display device 5), and it is possible to display a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions). , When the first round game is performed among the plurality of round games, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and if the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the predetermined number is specified. After the lapse of the period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the game medium is the game medium within the predetermined period. When a prize is won in the variable winning means, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed without displaying the predetermined display as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display. A storage that can store at least image data including a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information. A plurality of means (for example, CGROM205) and an image based on the image data can be arranged. Has a display layer (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc. shown in FIG. 14-5), and the plurality of display layers. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the display area, and an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area. The storage means includes an effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 14-17), and the storage means displays at least a part of the specific image. If the display position in the area is changed from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG). Display position displacement information for displacement to the display area of the image display device 5 (upper position or lower position) can be stored (for example, a portion in which the displacement image data is stored in the CGROM 205), and the image processing is performed. The means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-23). By superimposing the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area to create a displacement target image, and applying the displacement image to the displacement target image. As a display image displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect, an image is created in which the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C is moved downward. The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) to display the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display. Yes, the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-26). The 1-interface image 006SG005I and the 2nd interface image 006SG005J are a portion drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player. Further, when the specific display is displayed, the predetermined display is displayed without being displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the gaming interest from being lowered. Further, since a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect, these displacements can be displayed. The specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of the specific image is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

That is, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, a predetermined display (when the prize is not won within the predetermined period) or a specific display (winning within the predetermined period) is displayed as the grant amount display. When) is displayed, the amount of grant can be appropriately displayed to prevent deterioration of the game entertainment, and the specific effect can be executed with a small amount of data. Also, when the specific effect is executed, the game-related information can be displayed. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the displayed image from being lowered. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in the interest of the game when installed in the amusement park and can execute a specific effect with a small amount of data without deteriorating the visibility of the displayed image of the game-related information.

Further, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment, and it is possible to execute a specific effect with a small amount of data and prevent the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from being deteriorated. As an example, a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) has a display area capable of displaying an image, and the display area has game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, For example, it is possible to display a display image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I or the second interface image 006SG005J) of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and a small symbol whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbol. Storage that can store at least image data including various display means (for example, an image display device 5), a specific image displayed in the display area (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image), and a display image of the game-related information. Means (eg, CGROM205) and a plurality of display layers (eg, layer 1 image drawing area, layer 2 image drawing area, layer 3 image drawing area, displacement shown in FIGS. 14-5) on which images based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, display control) having an image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers. Unit 123 and SDRAM 210), and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect process during variable display shown in FIGS. 14-17). The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5). Display position displacement information for displacement to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) can be stored (for example,). The CGROM 205 stores the data of the image for displacement), and the image processing means displaces the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data and displaced it based on the display position displacement information. A specific image can be generated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-23, a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed and displaced. For displacement with respect to the image to be displaced By applying the image, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R are moved upward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect, and the images of the middle area 006SG005C are directed downward. The effect executing means displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display (for example, development suggestion in the feature unit 006SG). The effect) can be executed, and the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, FIGS. 14-26). As shown in the above, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 11A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 11B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". Further, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical range is "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11 (A).

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11B.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and the "missing time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, it is common among the hit determination values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) set in the previous term. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values which can take the value in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio of the variable display result to be out of time is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from the time-reduced deviation reference value of 65317 in any of the set values, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 13, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as advance notice effects are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature Unit 006SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a design) and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 14-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 14-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG, a reach suggestion in the modification 006SG-1). It is possible to execute an effect, a revival effect in the modified example 006SG-2, a look-ahead notice effect in the modified example 006SG-3, a promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6). be,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, only the image data for displaying the specific image in the display area and the display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image are used, and the display position of the specific image is changed from the first position to the first position. Since the specific effect can be executed by displacing it at two positions, the amount of data stored in the storage means for executing the specific effect can be suppressed as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed using the dedicated image data. ..

The gaming machine of the form A2 is the gaming machine according to the form A1.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the display position of the game-related information is not displaced together with at least a part of the specific image, so that the game-related information is difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is executed. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

The gaming machine of the form A3 is the gaming machine according to the form A2.
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area overlapping the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is an image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect. Duplicate display),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed overlapping with the displacement specific image, so that the player feels uncomfortable. You can recognize game-related information without any problem.

The gaming machine of the form A4 is the gaming machine according to the form A2.
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in a region that does not overlap with the displacement specific image in the display region (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is a left region 006SG005L, a middle region 006SG005C, and a right region during the development suggestion effect. The part displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with each image of the area 006SG005R),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displacement specific image, so that the player can accurately perform the game. Can recognize game-related information.

The gaming machine of the form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A2 to A4.
A game identification information variable display executing means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing variable display of game identification information (for example, special symbol) is provided. ,
The effect executing means is
In the first area in the display area, it is possible to execute variable display of the effect identification information according to the variable display of the game identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, of the image display device 5. In the central part of the display area, the part where variable display of decorative symbols can be executed according to the variable display of special symbols),
In the second area in the display area, which is different from the first area and smaller than the first area, it is possible to execute the variable display of the reduced identification information according to the variable display of the game identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion capable of performing variable display of a small symbol according to variable display of a special symbol).
The display image of the effect identification information is arranged in the specific display layer, and the visual state is changed from the first visual state to the second visual state, which is less visible to the player than the first visual state, according to the execution of the specific effect. The decorative pattern changes to a state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 The part where visibility is reduced by moving upward or downward from the center of the display area),
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged in the special display layer, and the visual recognition state does not change from the first visual recognition state according to the execution of the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 14-21 and 14-23 are shown. As described above, the small symbol is drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbol, it does not move from the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed, so that the visibility does not deteriorate. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by changing the visual state of the identification information for the effect from the first visual state to the second visual state by the execution of the specific effect, and the effect is reduced by the execution of the specific effect. Since the visual recognition state of the identification information does not change from the first visual recognition state, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the reduced identification information even during the execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A5.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, the upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 14-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, the lower area shown in FIG. 14-31). 006SG005B), including
The effect executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (C), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are displayed. (A portion for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image), it is possible to display an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displacement specific image (for example, the figure). As shown in 14-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
When the relative position between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is displaced, the first specific display area and the first specific display area are located at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area. 2 An effect image different from the image displayed in the specific display area (for example, the cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIGS. 14-31) is displayed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player more effectively recognize the displacement of the specific image to the second position as the specific effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form A7 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A6.
The effect executing means can displace the first specific display area in the first direction as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect, and the second specific can be used. The display area can be displaced toward a second direction opposite to the first direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31 (D), the upper area 006SG005T is on the right side and the lower area 006SG005B is on the left side. A portion to be moved toward the direction, or a portion to move the upper region 006SG005T upward and the lower region 006SG005B downward as shown in FIG. 14-31 (E)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as a specific effect, the displacement of the specific image to the second position is the second direction opposite to the displacement of the first specific display area in the first direction and the first direction of the second specific display area. By executing it as a displacement in the direction, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the form A8 is the gaming machine according to the form A6 or the form A7.
The displacement amount of the first specific display area and the displacement amount of the second specific display area in the specific effect are different (for example, as shown in the modified example 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are used as pre-reading notice effects. When the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions, the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005B is different).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A6 to A8.
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is a decoration. The part that is drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the design or background image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the display position of the specific image is displaced as a specific effect, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, the displacement of the display position of the specific image is made more conspicuous by comparing these specific images with the effect image. It is possible to further improve the effect of a specific effect.

The gaming machine of the form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A6 to A9.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The effect executing means can display the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-30, a portion capable of displaying the crack effect image 006SG005H in two colors of blue and red, and a portion thereof. As shown in FIGS. 14-33, the cutting effect image 006SG005S can be displayed in three colors of blue, green, and red).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display mode the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in any color. The part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on the color, or the part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on which color the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed as shown in FIGS. 14-33).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A10.
The specific effect is an effect in which the specific image changes stepwise (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, it is displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG. The part where the amount of movement of the image is gradually increased, and as shown in FIGS. 14-27, the decorative pattern inside is gradually expanded in the revival production of the modified example 006SG-2. As shown in Fig. 14-35, the part where the amount of movement of the fragments constituting the decorative pattern gradually increases, the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image is gradually large in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5. The part to go),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by changing the specific image step by step.

The gaming machine of the form A12 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A11.
The specific effect is an effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position toward the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, the development suggestion of the feature unit 006SG. In the production, the amount of movement of the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 14-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside are stepwise from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral edge portion of the display area. The moving part, the part where the decorative pattern and the background image are gradually distorted toward the left side in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the displacement from the first position to the second position of the specific image in the specific effect can be emphasized, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the form A13 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A11.
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image pieces (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments as shown in FIGS. 14-28).
The specific effect is an effect in which the number of the displayed image pieces is gradually increased (for example, as shown in the modified example 006SG-2, a plurality of fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside are the progress of the revival effect. The part that gradually increases according to),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to strongly impress the player with a specific effect by the visual effect that the image pieces gradually increase.

The gaming machine of the embodiment A14 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A11.
The specific effect is an effect in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area is gradually increased (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-28, in the revival effect, the image display device 5 The part where the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area gradually increases),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area is gradually increased, so that the player can be more effectively attracted to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the form A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A11 to A14.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The storage means can store a plurality of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of displacement image data are stored in the CGROM 206).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display position displacement information the specific image is displaced from (for example, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the left region 006SG005L, While the displacement image data for sliding the images of the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R to the third stage is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area are used. Since the displacement image data for sliding the image of 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage is used, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion effect. Part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the displacement mode of the specific image in the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A11 to A15.
The plurality of display position displacement information is the first display position change information in which the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are displacement image data for sliding movement to the third stage), and the specific image is from the first aspect to the first aspect. The second display position change information that does not change in two modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22, in the variable display with the normal reach displacement pattern, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are the first stage. Or data for displacement image for sliding to the second stage), including
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common change portion in which the image processing means changes the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, FIG. As shown in 14-21 and FIG. 14-22, when the image for the displacement image in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to move to the third stage is used, and the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, In the case of using the displacement image data in which the image of the right region 006SG005R slides to the first stage, the portion where the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage is common. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. When the displacement image data is used, the part where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage is common).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect as the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A16.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (C), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are displayed. (A portion for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image), it is possible to display an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displacement specific image (for example, the figure). As shown in 14-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
After the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, shown in FIGS. 14-31 (D) and 14-31 (E)). (A portion in which the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved to the left side, and then the boundary portion between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is moved upward and downward, respectively).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, so that the effect of the specific effect can be enhanced. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of the embodiment A18 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A17.
The boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is different from at least one display area among the plurality of display areas including the first specific display area and the second specific display area. It is displaceable in the direction (eg, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (D) and 14-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, but the upper part. The boundary between the area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is a part that moves in the vertical direction),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the plurality of display areas and the displacement of the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

The gaming machine of the form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A18.
At least in the specific display layer, the image can be arranged over the area corresponding to the display area and the area outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-39, the promotion effect is executed. At the time, the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is outside the display area of the image display device 5. Placement part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when a displacement specific image is displayed in the display area as a specific effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display is performed in the display area.
In the modified example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when the promotion effect (specific effect) is executed, the displacement target image is enlarged so that the left-right width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. The embodiment A for creating an image for promotion effect by applying a displacement image to the whole is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied is limited to the displacement target image. It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of the form A20 is the gaming machine according to the form A19.
The effect executing means can enlarge the image displayed in the display area during the period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, depending on the progress of the promotion effect). The part that gradually enlarges the decorative pattern drawn / placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / placed in the layer 3 image drawing area),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area in the process of displaying the displacement specific image while maintaining the effect of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the form A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A20.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and the first specific display area and the second specific image are displayed as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose position is displaced relative to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31 (D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , The upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example,). As shown in the modification 006SG-3, the part where the image manually displayed in the upper region 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B are different),.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the specific effect can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

The gaming machine of the form A22 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A20.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and the first specific display area and the second specific image are displayed as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose position is displaced relative to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31 (D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , The upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area is displayed. It is the same (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side). At least part of the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give unexpectedness to a specific effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the form A23 is the gaming machine according to the form A21 or the form A22.
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is the first specific display when the displacement specific image is displayed. In the display area of the image display device 5, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are not displayed in the area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect). A part of the image displayed over is not displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve the production interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of the form A24 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A23.
The display means can display a stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye in the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'. Is a part where a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image) can be displayed),
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect for displaying the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45 (B), a portion where the notice effect during variable display can be displayed on the stereoscopic image).
When the specific effect is executed, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45 (D), when the development suggestion effect is executed, the development is performed. The part where the image displayed as a suggestion effect is displayed as a stereoscopic image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's interest can be improved by the stereoscopic effect, and the displacement specific image is not displayed as the stereoscopic image in the specific effect, so that the specific effect can be suitably carried out.

The gaming machine of the form A25 is the gaming machine according to the form A24.
The image for the right eye and the image for the left eye are arranged in a stereoscopic display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the stereoscopic effect can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine of the form A26 is the gaming machine according to the form A24 or the form A25.
The effect executing means can execute the stereoscopic effect as an introduction effect of the specific effect in a period before the execution period of the specific effect during variable display.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the specific effect is executed by executing the stereoscopic effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, and the like. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates according to the program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives the effect control command via the input circuit 260. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control of the image display device 5 such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 on the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 based on the effect control command. Perform the processing to make it.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the display control unit 123 includes characters (also referred to as image data such as people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, and CG data), decorative patterns, and backgrounds as image element data used as sprite images. The first reserved storage display area 006SG005D for displaying the image and the first special figure reserved storage number as game-related information in the feature unit 006SG and the second reserved storage for displaying the second special figure reserved storage number in a identifiable manner. Displayed together with CGROM205 for storing data such as the first interface image 006SG005I for displaying the display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol, and SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the control circuit.

The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received effect control command to the display control unit 123. The CGROM 205 previously stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns), and background image image data. It is a ROM for storing. The CGROM 205 in the feature unit 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for shifting the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying the displacement target image to be described later. There is. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. Then, the display control unit 123 executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, attributes (parameters used when drawing a character, the drawing order of the character, the number of colors, the enlargement / reduction ratio, and the like. Attribute register 203 that stores (data that specifies palette numbers, coordinates, etc.), drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images in the drawing area described later in the VRAM area, and CG data stored in CGROM 205 in the VRAM area. Data transfer control unit 211 that controls transfer, video signals for displaying image data stored in the display image creation area described later in the VRAM area (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) It is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs a signal and a synchronization signal, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the data to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 201, and an infrared camera 60 is connected to the system bus. The image processing DSP 264 is connected. Further, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via the CG bus interface 204. The system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and the attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus so that the system register 202 can be accessed. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus so that the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203 can be accessed.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via the VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus so that the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

In the system register 202, a system control register for storing instructions such as initial setting, drawing, and data transfer, an interrupt control register for storing interrupt signal output instructions described later, a drawing area in the VRAM area, and arrangement of palette data. A drawing register for storing an area and the like, a data transfer register for storing a transfer source address and a transfer destination address at the time of data transfer, a display register for storing a display image creation area in the VRAM area, and the like are allocated.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the effect control CPU 120 at each start of the V blank (cycle for updating the image), and outputs various other interrupt signals to the effect control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In the feature unit 006SG, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area allocated as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. In the meantime, drawing is performed in the other area.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (a) and 14-2 (b), in the feature unit 006SG, an image for displaying on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) a plurality of layers. Is being generated. In the VRAM area, a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each of these layers and an image drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (combined) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image for the purpose is arranged (see FIG. 14-5). It should be noted that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and the higher the image, the higher the display priority is set in the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the higher the display priority in the image display device 5. Is set low.

As shown in FIGS. 14-5 (A) and 14-5 (B), a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing / arranging a layer 1 image and a layer 2 image are drawn / arranged in the VRAM area. A layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 3 image are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image, which will be described later, and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

In the displacement image creation area, an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area is created as a displacement target image. This is an area for creating a displacement image by applying a displacement image described later to the displacement target image.

In the display image creation area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image (combined) or an image in which an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area are superimposed (combined). This is the area to be created as an image.

The image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image having the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is an image display. An image having a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are the most in the image display device 5. Each image has a low display priority (display priority: low).

That is, layer 1 is an upper layer having the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer having an image display priority lower than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer having the lowest image display priority. It is a layer.

As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (b) and 14-5 (B), in the layer 1 image drawing area, the first special figure reserved storage number is identifiablely displayed in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U for identifiable display of the second reserved storage number, and in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5. This is a drawing area for drawing these images in order to display the second interface image 006SG005J including a small design whose display area is smaller than the decorative design.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the left, middle, and right decorative patterns in order to execute variable display of the decorative patterns in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the background image in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In the feature unit 006SG, an image drawn / arranged in these layer 1 image drawing areas (layer 1 image), an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area. By superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (the image of the layer 3), it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) have the highest display priority, and thus are the highest in the image display device 5. Since the image (decorative pattern) displayed as the upper layer image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image display device 5 The image (background image) displayed in the middle layer image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image in the image display device 5 because the display priority is set to the lowest.

The image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area in the feature unit 006SG has a transparency of 0% because the upper layer image makes the overlapping portion of the lower layer image invisible to the player when superimposed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency of the image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area is set to be higher than 0% depending on the situation, and the image display device 5 An image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the above or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Next, a displacement method of the displacement target image in the feature unit 006SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), a plurality of pixels having a red component value (R value) and a green component value (G value) are arranged in the displacement image applied to the displacement target image. These R value and G value each take a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Explaining the pixel A of one of these a plurality of pixels as an example, the display control unit 123 is in the displacement target image according to the values of the R value and the G value of the pixel A from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image. The position of the pixel X to be displaced is specified from. Specifically, if the R value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the display control unit 123 moves from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image toward the minus direction (left direction) of the X axis. Is specified as the coordinates (position) of the pixel X in the X-axis direction, and if the R value of the pixel A is 129 to 256, the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is in the plus direction (right direction) of the X-axis. The position moved toward the pixel X is specified as the coordinates of the pixel X in the X-axis direction. The amount of movement in the X-axis direction from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is a difference from 128, which is the median value of the R value.

Further, if the G value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is the coordinate of the pixel X in the Y axis direction. If the G value of the pixel A is 129 to 256, the position moved from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image toward the plus direction (upward) of the Y axis is the Y-axis direction of the pixel X. Specify as the coordinates (position) of. The amount of movement in the Y-axis direction from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is a difference from 128, which is the median value of the G value.

Then, after the position of the pixel X in the displacement target image is specified, the pixel X is designated as a pixel to be displayed at the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, the pixel X is displaced to the position corresponding to the pixel A. That is, in the present feature unit 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and the G value of the pixel A, any pixel X can be displaced to the position corresponding to the pixel A, and the R value and the G of the pixel A can be displaced. By adjusting the values to the same value, it is possible to displace a specific pixel X, which is the same amount away from the position corresponding to the pixel A, to the position corresponding to the pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for a plurality of pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), the displacement image has a plurality of regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement) in which the R value and the G value are different from each other. Image d) is configured, and each region is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement image.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-4 (A) to 14-4 (C), the R value is 128 and the G value is any one of 1 to 127 as the region constituting the displacement image. A displacement image a, an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 129 to 256, a displacement image b, an R value of any one of 1 to 127, and a G value of 128. A displacement image c, an image d for displacement having an R value of any one of 129 to 256 and a G value of 128 is provided, and an image of a triple circle is used as a displacement target image.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (D), for the displacement image a, in the displacement target image, the range moved downward by the difference of the G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image a is the displacement image. Specify in the display range of. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (E), for the displacement image b, in the displacement target image, the range moved above the difference of the G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image b is displayed in the displacement image. Specify in the range. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (F), for the displacement image c, in the displacement target image, the range moved to the left by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image c is the displacement image. Specify in the display range. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (G), for the displacement image d, in the displacement target image, the position moved to the right by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image d is the displacement image. Specify in the display range.

As described above, the range specified from the displacement target image by the R and G values of the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d is set as the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement. By displacing to the positions of the image c and the displacement image d, a displacement image as shown in FIG. 14-4 (H) is generated.

In this feature unit 006SG, the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are set to either the R value or the G value as a fixed value, so that the displacement image a, Although the boundaries of the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are clearly separated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement image d are used. It is also possible to generate an image such as a gradation as a displacement image by gradually making the R value and the G value of the pixels near the boundaries of the image c and the displacement image d different from each other.

FIG. 14-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 006SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 14-6 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-6 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing" or "big hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening, which notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-6 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 14-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 14-7, in the feature unit 006SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 14-8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 006SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 006SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 006SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 006SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 006SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

FIG. 14-9 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 006SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 006SG will be described with reference to FIG. 14-9 (B). In the feature unit 006SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A to the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variation jackpot A to the probability variation jackpot C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is in the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously without intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 006SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 14-10 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG. In this feature unit 006SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 006SG is provided with one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to these, and two types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided. The above or only one type may be provided.

The super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α, and the super reach β. As the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit is provided.

As shown in FIG. 14-10, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 006SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 006SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In particular, the special map fluctuation time of the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach α fluctuation pattern. That is, the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set so that the jackpot expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” is higher than that of the super reach α fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random values for determining the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in the feature unit 006 are displayed in a variable manner. It is also a fluctuation pattern that executes a development suggestion effect to the reach effect of super reach after the reach is established. In the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed without developing into the super reach reach effect after the development suggestion effect is executed, while the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2) is displayed. , PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the reach effect of the super reach is executed after the execution of the development suggestion effect.

In the feature unit 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are displayed in a variable manner. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the normal reach and the variation pattern of the super reach are illustrated. A fluctuation pattern that does not execute the development suggestion effect may be provided. In addition, when the development suggestion effect is executed, the ratio of developing to the reach effect of the super reach may be set higher than the case where the development suggestion effect is not executed.

FIG. 14-11 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG. In this feature unit 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-11, when the variable display result is a big hit, the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. It is determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In the present feature unit 006SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the same big hit variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables having different determination ratios of any one of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 are provided, and different jackpot variation pattern determination tables are provided according to the jackpot type. May be used to determine the variation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern variable display results in a jackpot. You can improve your hobby.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α deviation variation pattern), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for use, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. Determined from (non-reach off-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β off-off fluctuation pattern) do.

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 006SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on this, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data. , The storage number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on this, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Numerical data indicating random numbers, for example, random numbers MR2 to MR4, which are not generated by the random number circuit 104, are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-1 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area shown in FIG. 14-15 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 006SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold storage number notification command ( The first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer are associated with these start opening winning designation commands and the hold storage number notification commands. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

FIG. 14-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step 006SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 006SGS142, the second special figure holding storage number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage count value and the total holding storage count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 006SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. As described above, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 006SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "1" (step 006SGS148), the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 14-8 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select a table and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 006SGS150a). In this step 006SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , In the process of step 006SGS150a, the special figure display result using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the gaming state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 006SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type can be selected. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability change B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability change C" corresponding to probability change jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After the end of step 006SGS155, or when it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 006SGS150a; N), whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of () and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 006SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 006SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 14-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS164).

In the determination in step 006SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 006SGS161; N), the gaming state is probablely changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in the state or the time saving state (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS168; Y), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS168; Y). Step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 006SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the hold storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit. The reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified by reading the above, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special map is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 006SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 006SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 006SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation or the like is displayed. Based on this, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected by referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, and loss variation pattern determination tables A to D. (Step 006SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined by the process of step 006SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 006SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “missing”.

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in step 006SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special map games using the second special symbol (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the process of step 006SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol are set (step 006SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially send the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS177, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 006SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern It may be transmitted in the order of a designated command, a game state designation command, a first hold storage number notification command, a second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

14-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state, terminates the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 006SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step 006SGS184) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. , Hit start 1 designated command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designated command (probable variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designated command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored on the effect control board 12. Hit start 4 Make settings for transmitting the designated command (non-probability change) (step 006SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 006SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is increased. When is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), the time saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS194) in order to end the time saving control, and then the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is supported. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low accuracy low base state) (step 006SGS195), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 14-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 006SGS201). When the big hit end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) for displaying the big hit end on the image display device 5 on the big hit end display timer. Is set (step 006SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), and the time saving count counter is set to "0". After setting (step 006SGS209), the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), by executing step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 006SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 006SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control CPU 120 will be described. 14-16 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 has a background image change process (step 006SG162) for changing the background image displayed on the image display device 5 after the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) described above is executed in the effect control process process. ) Is executed, and any of the processes of steps S170 to S175 is executed.

As the background image change processing, for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image at the start timing of variable display (the timing when the effect control process process is executed while the value of the effect control process flag is set to 1). The change of the background image displayed on the device 5 may be determined at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%), and the image display device 5 may start displaying a new background image according to the determination. That is, in the feature unit 006SG, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the effect corresponding to the variable display are executed in the state where any one of the plurality of background images is displayed on the image display device 5. There is.

When the game state changes in the background image change process (for example, from the normal state to the big hit game state, from the big hit game state to the probable change state or the time saving state, from the probable change state or the time saving state to the big hit state or the normal state). When the state is changed), the background image corresponding to the game state of the change destination may be displayed on the image display device 5.

FIG. 14-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display of the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 is a process timer according to the process table selected by the effect control CPU 120 according to the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process, and the effect control CPU 120 is in the variable display start setting process. The respective values of the set variable display time timer and variable display control timer are set to -1 (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control status for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the contents of the process data set next (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). (Step 006SGS909). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS921). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS921; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control unit 123 on the next display screen of the left middle right decorative symbol (display switching of the previous decorative symbol). The image data (the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the time point) is created (step 006SGS922). Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a variable display of a fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variable pattern (step 066SGS923; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927, and if the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927. Further, it is determined whether or not the display image processing flag described later is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS926, and if the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), the content of the process data being executed is confirmed. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the super reach into the reach effect (step 006SGS925). If it is not the development suggestion start timing for the reach production of the super reach (step 006SGS925; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927, and if it is the development suggestion start timing for the super reach reach production (step 006SGS925; Y), the step 006SGS926 is performed. move on.

As step 006SGS926, the effect control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process for processing (displacement) a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to perform a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created in the above-mentioned steps 006SGS922 and step 006SGS921 on the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on an image obtained by superimposing an image such as a set background image and an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the image display device 5 displays a background image, a character image, a decorative pattern, and the like in the variation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 14-19, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 006SG is positioned in advance so as to be displayed in a part of the background image and the display area. Is the adjusted first interface image 006SG005I, the second interface image 006SG005J, and a decorative pattern. In particular, the background image in the feature unit 006SG is drawn as an image that is longer in the left-right width direction and the vertical width direction than the display area of the image display device 5, and the background is in the display area of the image display device 5. The central part of the image in the horizontal width direction is displayed. That is, in the feature unit 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are the vertical width dimension and the horizontal width than the display area of the image display device 5. It is an area for drawing and arranging an image having a long dimension, and in the display area of the image display device 5, only a portion of the image corresponding to the display area is displayed.

In this feature unit 006SG, an image whose vertical width dimension and horizontal width dimension are longer than the display area of the image display device 5 is drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area. The present invention is not limited to this, and the layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area are vertically wider than the display area of the image display device 5. While the area for drawing and arranging an image having long dimensions and left-right width dimensions is used, the display image creation area is an image having the same vertical width dimension and left-right width dimension as the display area of the image display device 5. May be used as an image for drawing and arranging. In this case, of the images (background images) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area, only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5 is arranged in the display image creation area to create an image. The background image may be displayed in the display area of the display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 006SGS930; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is per special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing the display image processing process (step 006SGS926) during the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14-17. In the display image processing process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS941). When the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 006SGS942). When the variable display during execution is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 006SGS942; Y), the displacement image data for successful development to the super reach effect (for notification of execution of the super reach effect) is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

The image data for displacement in the feature unit 006SG includes an image to be displaced (in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an image in which an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed). This is data in which displacement images for application to (images arranged in the displacement image creation area) are arranged in order in chronological order.

Further, when the variable display during execution is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (step 006SGS942; N), the effect control CPU 120 is for failure to develop into a super reach effect (for non-execution notification of the super reach effect). As the displacement image data, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether to select the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A or the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A may be determined at a rate of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B may be determined at a rate of 50%.

In this feature unit 006SG, there are two types of image data for displacement for failure of development to super reach effect: displacement image data of A for failure of development of super reach effect and displacement image data of B for failure of development of super reach effect. Although the embodiment in which the displacement image data can be selected is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement image data that can be selected as the displacement image data for failure to develop into a super reach effect is 3. It may be one or more.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). When the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS946), when the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B is determined (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B is selected and the step 006SGS948 is selected. Proceed to (step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, the first displacement image is selected from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS951.

When the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step). 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the effect control CPU 120 executes the displacement image drawing process. In the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 14-5 in the displacement image creation area. A displacement target image may be created by compositing (superimposing), and a process of creating a displacement image may be executed by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image is determined by, for example, whether or not the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data. do it.

When the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off to end the display image processing process (step 006SGS953), and the displacement image drawing process is performed. If the displacement image created in is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is terminated without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the feature unit 006SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-20 to 14-23. First, as shown in FIGS. 14-20 (A) and 14-20 (B), in the feature unit 006SG, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the gaming state. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state), the character image and the numerical image are combined as a decorative pattern for the normal state. A decorative pattern is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (B), when the gaming state is the time saving state (low accuracy low base state or high accuracy high base state), the decoration for the time saving state of only the numerical image is used as the decorative pattern. The design is displayed.

Then, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, first, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 (A) and 14-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging due to the combination of reach. After that, as the decorative pattern inside, the decorative pattern with a numerical value different from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, the development suggestion effect is executed. As a development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-21 (C), among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L including the left decorative pattern. , The middle area 006SG005C including the decorative pattern in the middle, and the right area 006SG005R including the decorative pattern on the right. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 (C) to 14-21 (E), the images displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (decorative patterns and background images included in the middle region 006SG005C) are gradually displayed. A development notification symbol (indicated as "development!" Shown in FIGS. 14-21 (C) to 14-21 (E)) that informs the development of a super reach reach effect from above by sliding downward. The symbol) is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

The development notification symbol in the feature unit 006SG is a symbol that is displayed only when the development suggestion effect is executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

Further, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (decorative pattern and background image on the left) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the left decorative pattern and the background image). The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 14-21 (C) and the second step shown in FIG. 14-21 (D). Eyes, the third stage shown in FIG. 14-21 (E), and the number increases as the stage progresses.

Then, when the third stage slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is completed, the center part of the display area of the image display device 5 (the central part of the middle area 006SG005C) is reached. Development notification The movement of the symbol is completed, and the development of the super reach to reach production is notified.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, first, as shown in FIGS. 14-22 (A) and 14-22 (B), the left and right decorative patterns stop swinging due to the combination of reach. After that, as the decorative pattern inside, the decorative pattern with a numerical value different from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, the development suggestion effect is executed. As a development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-22 (C), among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L including the left decorative pattern. , The middle area 006SG005C including the decorative pattern in the middle, and the right area 006SG005R including the decorative pattern on the right. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-22 (C) to 14-22 (E), the images displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (decorative patterns and background images included in the middle region 006SG005C) are gradually displayed. A development notification symbol that informs the development of the reach effect of the super reach from above by sliding downward is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (decorative pattern and background image on the left) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the left decorative pattern and the background image). The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 14-22 (C) and the second step shown in FIG. 14-22 (D). It increases with the eyes and stages.

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first-step slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is executed, or the second-step slide movement is performed. After the execution, as shown in FIG. 14-22 (E), the development suggestion effect is completed without the third stage slide movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 is shown in FIG. The state returns to the state shown in -22 (B), and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are stopped at the combination indicating the detachment.

As shown in FIGS. 14-21 (C) to 14-21 (E), the slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R in the feature unit 006SG. Illustrates a mode in which the number increases as the stage progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and slides of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R. The amount of movement may decrease as the stage progresses, or the amount of movement may increase or decrease only in any of the first to third stages.

Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, as a development suggestion effect, each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is illustrated as a form in which each image can be moved and displayed in up to three stages. The number of steps for sliding and moving each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R as a development suggestion effect may be two or less or four or more.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 (C) to 14-21 (E), in the feature unit 006SG, the slide direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R is displayed in the middle area 006SG005C. The present invention is not limited to this, and the slide direction of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R is the middle region 006SG005C. It may be in the same direction as the image displayed in.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced for the development suggestion effect when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state). The image displayed on the image display device 5 may be displaced for the development suggestion effect when the gaming state is a time saving state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state). ..

As a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 (A) to 14-23 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved storage display area. The first interface image 006SG005I including the 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including the small symbol are drawn, and the decorative symbol including the development notification symbol described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer is formed. 3 A background image is drawn in the image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the image to be displaced is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. A displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to be displayed on the image display device 5. Images are being created.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-22, the first interface image 006SG005I and the first interface image 006SG005I are used in both the case of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach and the case of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. Since the second interface image 006SG005J is an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, it is not subject to displacement. For this reason, the decorative design moves toward the upper side or the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5 as a development suggestion effect, so that the visibility from the player is lowered, while the first interface image 006SG005I is the image display device 5. Since the display of the second interface image 006SG005J at the lower part of the display area is maintained at the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is deteriorated. There is no.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image of is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the displacement for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage. Image data is used. Here, as described above, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is set to have a higher ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach. The ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the suggestion effect.

Further, in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains the left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains the middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains the right decorative pattern. Since the decorative design of No. slides and moves without being divided, including the character and the number, it is prevented that the development suggestion production is less interesting due to the division of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. ing.

The feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , Only one or two of the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 006SG, the image data for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image and the displacement image data for shifting the display position of the decorative pattern and the background image are obtained. Specific effects that displace the display position of these decorative patterns and background images just by using them (development suggestion effect in feature unit 006SG, reach suggestion effect in variant 006SG-1, revival effect in variant 006SG-2, variant 006SG- Since it is possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect in 3, the promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6), these specific effects are executed using dedicated data. The amount of data to be stored in the CGROM 205 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the data is stored in the CGROM 205.

In particular, since the feature unit 006SG can display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, originally, a specific effect is produced depending on the case where each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. The pattern must be stored in the CGROM 205 in advance, but in the feature unit 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced only by using the data of the displacement image, so that the pattern is stored in the CGROM 205. The amount of data can be suppressed. In the feature unit 006SG, as game-related information, the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D capable of specifying the first special figure reserved storage number and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U capable of specifying the second special figure reserved storage number. , And a mode in which a small symbol whose display area is smaller than that of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is shortened as the game-related information. A fourth that can identify that a launch promotion display or a variable display that urges the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big winning opening or the gate 41 by being in a state or a probable change state is being executed. A design or the like may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority, that is, the feature unit 006SG. Since it is a non-target image of the image displacement in the development suggestion effect in, the display position does not shift together with the image of the left region 006SG005L, the image of the right region 006SG005R, and the image of the middle region 006SG005C, which is the target of the displacement, and the development suggestion. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in visually recognizing game-related information such as the number of reserved special figures and the variable display of small symbols when the effect is executed.

Further, of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right region 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect. Since the display position of the two-interface image 006SG005J itself does not shift, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the second interface image 006SG005J without discomfort. On the other hand, since the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the lower part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R during the development suggestion production, the player can see the player. The first special figure reserved storage number in the first interface image 006SG005I is accurately displayed without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of each image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. It is possible to recognize the hold storage display area 006SG005D and the second hold storage display area 006SG005U that identifiablely displays the number of hold storages in the second special figure.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative design is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative design is in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. By moving upward or downward from the portion, the visibility is lowered, so that the effect of the development suggestion effect can be improved. Further, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed, so that the visibility does not deteriorate. The player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the small symbol even during the execution of the development suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually increases. While improving the effect of the development suggestion effect, the amount of movement of the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R at each stage can be emphasized, so that the effect is further improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are slid to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the displacement image for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage. Because the data for development is used, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the image data for displacement used in the development suggestion effect, so that the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R in the development suggestion effect It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of moving stages of the image, and it is possible to improve the production interest of the development suggestion production.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-22, when the image for the displacement image in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are slid to the third stage is used, and the left region 006SG005L, the middle. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage, the parts where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide and move to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the second stage. When using the slide-moving displacement image data, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R have the same part where the images slide and move up to the second stage, so the left region 006SG005L is used as a development suggestion effect. Since the player can pay attention to the process such as the number of stages in which the images of the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R slide and move, the effect of the development suggestion can be further improved.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Will be.

For example, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of super reach into a reach effect as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 14-24 and 14-25 as a modification 006SG-1, it is suggested that the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reach during variable display. The reach suggestion effect may be feasible.

The production mode of the reach suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-24 and 14-25. First, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, as shown in FIGS. 14-24 (A) to 14-24 (C), the left decoration is at the timing immediately before the stop of the left decoration symbol. The action image of the character or the like acts on the symbol, and the decorative symbol on the left stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the left is distorted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-24 (D) to 14-24 (F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the stop of the right decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol acts on the right. The decorative pattern stops and reaches. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the right is distorted and displayed.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the non-reach fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 14-25 (A) to 14-25 (C), the left decorative symbol is at the timing immediately before the stop of the left decorative symbol. The action image of the character or the like acts on the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the left is distorted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-25 (D) to 14-25 (F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the stop of the right decorative symbol, but the right The number of symbols that do not match the reach as decorative symbols of is stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern on the right stops and reaches. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the right is displayed without distortion.

As a reach suggestion effect in the present modification 006SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 14-26 (A) to 14-26 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage. The first interface image 006SG005I including the display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including the small symbol are drawn, the action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer 3 image drawing area is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn on. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-1, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. A displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In the present modification 006SG-1, a mode in which a reach suggestion effect can be executed in a variable display of fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The reach suggestion effect may not be executed in a part of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, as a reach suggestion effect, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on the left and right decorative patterns is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. As the reach suggestion effect in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach, the case where the action image acts on the decorative symbol only once (only acts on the decorative symbol on the left) may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on a decorative pattern is exemplified as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach suggestion effects are present. The action image of the above may be displayed, and the reach ratio may be different depending on which action image acts on the decorative pattern.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, in the case where the reach is not achieved even though the action image of the character or the like acts as the reach suggestion effect, the acted decorative pattern or the background image in which the display area overlaps with the decorative pattern is displayed. Although a form in which a part is not distorted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the action image is always applied regardless of whether or not the reach is achieved. It is also possible to distort a part of the background image in which the decorative pattern on which the decoration is applied overlaps with the decorative pattern and the display area.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern on which the action image acts and a part of the background image in which the decorative pattern and the display area overlap are distorted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern on which the action image acts overlaps with the decorative pattern and the display area. Only one of the parts of the background image may be distorted.

Further, in the feature unit 213SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28 as a modified example 006SG-2, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of detachment is displayed. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that changes into a combination of big hits.

The production mode of the revival effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28. First, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (A), after it is suggested that the variable display result is out of reach as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern reaches. It is oscillated by the combination of off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is overlapped and displayed on the decorative pattern inside, and a plurality of decorative patterns inside are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. It is displayed separately in the fragments of. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed as the second stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 14-27 (B), and each fragment is displayed as an image. It moves so as to diffuse from the central portion of the device 5 in different directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 14-27 (C), and each fragment is further displayed. Move to spread.

Then, as a crack in the fourth stage, an image is finally displayed in which fragments of the decorative pattern inside are scattered so as to diffuse, and then a new decorative pattern indicating that the decorative pattern inside is a big hit is displayed. Variable display stops.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (A), after it is suggested that the variable display result is out of order as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern is displayed. It is oscillated by the combination of reach off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is overlapped and displayed on the decorative pattern inside, and a plurality of decorative patterns inside are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. It is displayed separately in the fragments of. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed as the second stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 14-28 (B), and each fragment is displayed as an image. It moves so as to diffuse from the central portion of the device 5 in different directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 14-28 (C), and each fragment is further displayed. Move to spread.

However, in the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment, after the first stage crack is executed, after the second stage crack is executed, or after the third stage crack is executed, The revival effect is completed without executing the crack in the fourth stage, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIGS. 14-28 (A), and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are removed. Stop at the combination shown.

As a revival effect in the present modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 14-29 (A) to 14-29 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage display. The first interface image 006SG005I including the area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and the crack effect image 006SG005H is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-2, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to obtain the displacement image (middle). An image in which the decorative pattern of is divided into a plurality of fragments and each fragment is displayed so as to be diffused) is created.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 4 A display image to be displayed by the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

In particular, in the present modification 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside is gradually expanded as the revival effect, that is, in the revival effect, the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern to the display area of the image display device 5. Is gradually increased, so that the player can be more effectively focused on the revival effect by gradually expanding the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern.

In the present modification 006SG-2, a form in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is duplicated and displayed on the decorative pattern inside is illustrated as a revival effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect image is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit may be different depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, blue and red are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, and when the variable display result is a big hit, blue cracks are performed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival effect is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival effect is executed, and the red crack effect is displayed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The image 006SG005H may be displayed.

In the present modification 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are provided as the display color of the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the crack effect image 006SG005H is not limited to this. Three or more colors may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-2, a mode in which the revival effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The revival effect may be executed when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

Further, in the present modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 14-28, the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments in the resurrection effect, and the number of these fragments is maintained according to the progress of the resurrection effect. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the embodiment in which these fragments are moved stepwise from the central portion to the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5. The plurality of constituent fragments may be gradually increased according to the progress of the resurrection effect. By doing so, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the revival effect by the visual effect that the number of fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside increases as the revival effect progresses.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIG. 14-31 as a modification 006SG-3, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, variable display is executed in the hold storage with a fluctuation pattern of super reach. It is also possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that suggests that the variable display in which the variable display result is a big hit is executed from the variable display multiple times before.

The production mode of the look-ahead notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (A) and 14-31 (B) in a state where a plurality of reserved storages exist, the variable display during execution is stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (C) and 14-31 (D), when the next variable display is started, a cutting effect that crosses the display area left and right in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image 006SG005S is displayed in duplicate with respect to the decorative pattern and the background image. Then, of the display area displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the lower lower area 006SG005B including a part of the decorative pattern and the background image with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a boundary and the rest. It is divided into an upper upper region 006SG005T including a decorative pattern and a background image. That is, the boundary portion between the lower region 006SG005B and the upper upper region 006SG005T is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (D) to 14-31 (E), the lower region 006SG005B is on the left side along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper region 006SG005T is on the right side along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. Slide and move toward at the same time. Then, the lower region 006SG005B that slides to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides downward, and the upper region 006SG005T that slides to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides upward. .. At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is moved and displayed so as to follow both the boundary portion on the lower region 006SG005B side and the boundary portion on the upper region 006SG005T side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (E) and 14-31 (F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the lower area 006SG005B is slid downward and the upper area 006SG005T is slid upward. Starts displaying a black image. The display area of the black image expands according to the progress of the downward slide movement of the lower region 006SG005B and the upward slide movement of the upper region 006SG005T, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T move out of the display area. By completing the movement, only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed in the display area, which is a so-called blackout state.

After that, when the blackout ends, the display of a new background image and decorative pattern is started in the display area of the image display device 5. The pre-reading notice effect is repeatedly executed until the start of the variable display of the external pre-reading target.

As a look-ahead notice effect in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 14-32 (A) to 14-32 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, and a cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the drawing area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-3, there is a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing an image further below. Have been placed. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image including the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is created.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 5 A display image to be displayed by the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

As described above, in the present modification 006SG-3, in the look-ahead notice effect as the specific effect in the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (C) and 14-31 (D), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower part are shown. A decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area 006SG005B, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left side, respectively, at the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. Since the disconnection effect image 006SG005S is displayed, the player can more effectively recognize the movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B as the look-ahead notice effect to the left and right sides. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern or the background image. Even if the display position of the area 006SG005B is displaced, the display position of the cut effect image 006SG005S is not displaced. The displacement can be made more conspicuous, and the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (D) and 14-31 (E), after moving the upper region 006SG005T toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B toward the left side, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region are further moved. By moving the boundary portion with 006SG005B toward the upper side and the lower side, respectively, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further enhanced, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In particular, as a look-ahead notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (D) and 14-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left side, but the upper region 006SG005T. Since the boundary between the upper region 006SG005B and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary portion further enhances the effect of the look-ahead notice effect. Can be done.

In this modification 006SG-3, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is different from the right side, which is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving direction of the boundary portion between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T and the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. It suffices if it is different from either one.

In this modification 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a look-ahead notice effect, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are moved and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S are provided, and variable display of the look-ahead target is provided depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. The rate at which the variable display result in is a big hit may be different.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, three types of colors, blue, green, and red, are provided as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and when the variable display result of the look-ahead target is a big hit, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is used. It is displayed in blue at a rate of 10%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the look-ahead target is out of alignment, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue at a rate of 60%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 10%. Just do it.

By doing so, the player can pay attention to the display color of the disconnection effect image 006SG005S displayed during the look-ahead notice effect, so that the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further enhanced.

In the present modification 006SG-3, a form in which three kinds of colors of blue, green, and red are provided as display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cutting effect is not limited thereto. The display color of the image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. Further, the rate at which the variable display result of the look-ahead target becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) may be different depending on the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the display number of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and other aspects other than the color. ..

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as a look-ahead notice effect, a mode in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is divided into two regions along the cutting effect image 006SG005S has been exemplified. The pre-reading notice effect is not limited, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas. In this case, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect may be improved by changing the slide movement direction of each area.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as a look-ahead notice effect, a mode in which the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved respectively is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to this. The region to be moved may be only one of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the left side. It is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different from each other, so that the pre-reading notice effect is produced. It can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

In the present modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side are different. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed in the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side. At least a part of the image may be common. By doing so, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the pre-reading notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (C) and 14-31 (D), the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. The image displayed over the 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same as the image displayed over the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. It is not necessary that a part of the image is displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the production of the look-ahead notice production.

In this modification 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead notice effect (in FIG. 14-31 (D), the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved. The amount of movement (displacement) between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same when the upper region 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower region 006SG005B is moved downward in FIG. 14-31 (E). Is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of movement (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B when the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead notice effect. ) May be different. In this way, by making the amount of movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, which move in the opposite directions as the look-ahead notice effect different, different, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further improved.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, a mode in which the ratio of the variable display result of the look-ahead target to be a big hit is different depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-34 as a modification 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be changed for each variable display execution. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the look-ahead target becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) may be different depending on the display color of the final cutting effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 14-35 as a modification example 006SG-5, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a non-probability change jackpot or a two-round probability change with a small number of rounds is performed during the variable display. A combination of decorative symbols that are displayed in a combination that indicates the type of jackpot, such as a jackpot, and then the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed in the same state as the combination that indicates the jackpot, and finally stopped. You may execute a promotion effect (also called a re-lottery effect) to notify the jackpot type.

The production mode of the promotion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-35. First, after notifying that the variable display result is a big hit as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (A), after the end of these reach effects, the decorative design is changed to a non-probable big hit or a two-round probability change. It is displayed as a combination indicating a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player such as a jackpot (in the example shown in FIG. 14-35 (A), a combination of even "2" indicating a non-probability variable jackpot).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are used as promotion effects, such as a 2-round probability variation jackpot, a 5-round probability variation jackpot, and a 10-round probability variation jackpot. Variable display is performed at a constant speed while including combinations of other jackpot types of decorative symbols.

During the execution of the promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (C) and 14-35 (D), the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is directed to the left side in two steps. And distort.

Then, the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type (see FIG. 14-35 (A)) indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed first. In some cases, after the distortion of the first stage or the second stage of the promotion effect, the decorative symbol stops at the combination of the jackpot type (the combination of the probability variation jackpot in the example shown in FIGS. 14-35 (E)). On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed first, the decorative symbol is the decorative symbol after the first stage distortion of the promotion effect. It stops at the combination of big hit types (the combination of non-probable variable big hits in the example shown in FIG. 14-35 (F)).

In this modification 006SG-5, the "advantage for the player" between the jackpot types is controlled to whether or not the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends, and to the time saving state after the jackpot game ends. Refers to those with different variable display times and those with different numbers of rounds in big hit games.

As a promotion effect in the present modification 006SG-5, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (A) to 14-36 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage display. A first interface image 006SG005I including an area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The background image is drawn.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the image to be displaced is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image is created in which the central portion in the vertical direction is distorted toward the left side.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image is created.

The display image displayed on the image display device 5 in this modification 006SG-5 is an image that is longer than the display area of the image display device 5 in the horizontal width direction and the vertical width direction, like the feature unit 006SG. (See FIG. 14-19), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 14-37, the dimensions of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 in the left-right width direction are images. It may be the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in FIGS. 14-38 (A) to 14-38 (C), the promotion effect is in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5. When the central portion is distorted toward the left side, an image non-display portion in which no image is displayed is formed in the right portion of the display area.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 14-37, when the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the image display device 5, FIG. As shown in −39 (A) to FIG. 14-39 (D), when the promotion effect is executed, the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn. By enlarging the arranged background image or enlarging the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area, a part of the background image is moved out of the display area of the image display device 5. Deploy. By doing so, by applying the displacement image to the image to be displaced, even if the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, the right portion of the image display device 5 Since the background image arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed due to the enlargement, the image display device 5 is inappropriate because the above-mentioned image non-display portion is formed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the display will be displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 14-39, when the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, no image is displayed on the right portion of the display area. Although the embodiment in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged is illustrated in order to prevent the formation of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image non-display portion is formed. In order to prevent this, only the background image may be enlarged.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the displacement image is displayed on the entire displacement target image enlarged so that the left-right width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of creating an image for promotion effect by applying it, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied among the displacement target images is the display of the image display device 5. It is not necessary to displace only the part corresponding to the area, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, promotion effect is executed when the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the image display device 5. By enlarging the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, the image non-display part is formed during the promotion effect. The embodiment is illustrated to prevent the image from being drawn, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn / arranged. The enlargement of the background image may be performed stepwise according to the progress of the promotion effect (according to the increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). By doing so, the decorative pattern and the background image are suddenly enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5, so that a sense of discomfort can be reduced. Therefore, the display area of the image display device 5 can be displayed while maintaining the effect of the promotion effect. In the process of increasing the distortion of the displayed image, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display such as the image non-display portion being displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the reach effect of the super reach can be executed during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is in progress. In, it is possible to execute a pseudo-ream effect including a temporary stop of a decorative symbol and a revariable display, and the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state (big hit expectation) may be different according to the number of executions of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In particular, in the variable display for executing such a pseudo-continuous effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped immediately before the temporary stop timing of the decorative symbol, or a temporary stop suggestion effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be possible to execute a temporary stop notification effect for notifying the temporary stop of the decorative pattern.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged so that the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of a form in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part thereof, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion is performed in advance in the CGROM 205. An image having a size larger than the display area of the image display device 5 as an image for effect (at least the left-right width dimension is longer than the left-right width dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of this modification 006SG-5) is stored. However, by drawing and arranging the image in the displacement image creation area or the display image creation area, it may be possible to prevent the image non-display portion from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged so that the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of a mode in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part thereof, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect is executed. In this case, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 at a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of the present modification 006SG-5, the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5) in the display image creation area. An image (non-display image) different from the image (display image) may be arranged adjacent to the display image. By doing so, when the promotion effect is executed, the displayed image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other over the display area and the non-display area of the image display device 5, so that the image non-display portion is replaced. Therefore, a part of the non-display image will be displayed.

The feature unit 006SG exemplifies a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of super reach into a reach effect as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 14-40 to 14-42 as a modification 006SG-6, these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects are used as the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5. You may do it.

An effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-40. First, as shown in FIG. 14-40 (A), when a certain period of time elapses from the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and reach. After that, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is a part of the decorative symbol, moves from the upper side to the lower side. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ripple effect image 006SG005P so as to converge from the peripheral portion of the display area toward the central portion of the display area, and at the same time, the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P ( The left and right decorative patterns and background image) are displayed distorted.

When the variable display is a variable display for executing a pseudo-ream effect (variable display in which the pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops), as shown in FIGS. 14-40 (B), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and at the same time. , The ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporary stop and the pseudo-continuous pattern. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display in which the pseudo-ream effect is not executed (variable display in which the pseudo-ream symbol does not temporarily stop), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as it is, as shown in FIGS. 14-40 (C). Without doing this, the image is moved to the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 to be hidden, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is out of alignment is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In the present modification 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 14-40, a form suggesting that the decorative pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped by displaying the ripple effect image 006SG005P on the image display device 5 is provided. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the ripple effect image 006SG005P are provided, and in which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect. The ratio at which the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped may be different accordingly.

For example, in FIG. 14-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (doublely displayed) as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect, but as shown in FIGS. 14-41, a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect. Is provided, and the rate at which the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped may be different depending on the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect.

In this modification 006SG-6, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a part of the decorative symbol, that is, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a part of the variable display even in a period other than the pseudo-ream effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol different from the decorative symbol and may be a special symbol displayed only during the pseudo-continuous production.

As shown in FIGS. 14-42 (A) and 14-42 (B), the temporary stop notification effect is the ripple effect image 006SG005P after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect. The image is displayed so as to diffuse from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral edge of the display area, and the surrounding image (left and right decorative patterns and background image) of the ripple effect image 006SG005P is distorted. Is displayed.

As the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIGS. 14-43 (A) to 14-43 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area is used. The first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and the ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. It is drawn, and a decorative pattern including a pseudo-continuous pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-6, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement image (ripple) is applied to the displacement target image. The effect image 006SG005P creates a distorted decorative pattern and a background image).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

Further, in the feature unit 006GS, a mode of displaying an effect image by using an image display device 5 capable of displaying only a stereoscopic image is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 006SG-. As shown in FIGS. 14-44 and 14-45 as FIG. 7, the effect image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying a stereoscopic image.

The modified example 006SG-7 will be described below. In the above-mentioned feature unit 006SG and the modified example, a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) capable of displaying a plan view image (2D image) is used as the image display device 5. However, in the present modification 006SG-7, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5 that allows the player to visually recognize the stereoscopic image with the naked eye by the paralux barrier method. The feature is that by using ‘’, it is possible to display a stereoscopic image (3D image) in addition to a planar view image (2D image) as various images.

As shown in FIGS. 14-44, the naked-eye liquid crystal image display device 5'of this modification 006SG-7 is a liquid crystal image (video) composed of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image). The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying the image, the backlight 006SG901 that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the image liquid crystal panel on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900. It has a structure having a 006SG900 and a liquid crystal panel for a parallax barrier 006SG910 provided at a predetermined interval.

In the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, the player's left eye visually recognizes the right-eye image (R image) displayed in a vertically long strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the player's right eye displays the left-eye image (L image). It has a vertical striped black portion that serves as a shutter for preventing the player from visually recognizing, and a transparent portion that enables the player's right eye to visually recognize the image for the right eye and the player's left eye to visually recognize the image for the left eye. A liquid crystal with relatively high light transparency that enables a parallax barrier image display state for displaying a parallax barrier image and a transmissive state in which all pixels are transparent parts without vertical striped black parts. It is said to be a panel.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 displays, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of the left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 does not display the above-mentioned parallax barrier image ( A plan view image (2D image) can also be displayed by setting the display to full transparency.

That is, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'which is the display means of the present modification 006SG-7 is composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in addition to the non-stereoscopic image (2D image). It is possible to display a stereoscopic image with the naked eye.

The stereoscopic image composed of the right-eye image and the left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn on each of the above-mentioned layers in the same manner as the plan view image (2D image), while the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel. The disparity barrier image displayed on the 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When displaying an effect image using such a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5', another effect is stereoscopically displayed at a timing different from the specific effect (for example, development suggestion effect) in the present invention during variable display. It may be made feasible by displaying a visual image (3D image).

As shown in FIGS. 14-45 (A) to 14-45 (D), during the variable display, the autostereoscopic image display device 5'moves upward, which is a displacement specific image, as described above. The development suggestion effect, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moved downward are displayed, can be executed, and the execution period of the development suggestion effect is long. As a non-overlapping notice effect, a variable display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit is executed, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display notice effect.

That is, a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the image of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moved downward, which are the displacement specific images, are displayed. In this case, only the stereoscopic image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moved downward as described above, which are displacement specific images, are displayed, the display is non-stereoscopic. By making it a planar image (2D image) which is an image, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to the stereoscopic image, and the interest of the production is lowered. Can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the effect of displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward, which are the displacement specific images, and the middle region 006SG005C moved downward. Since the execution period is different from the development suggestion effect, which is a specific effect in which the image of is displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed during the same production, the stereoscopic image (3D) is displayed during the display of the displacement specific image. To prevent the image) from being displayed, data such as a display flag that can specify that the displacement specific image is being displayed is stored, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is based on the data. You may want to limit the display of. In addition, regarding these restrictions, a predetermined period before and after the period in which the displacement specific image is displayed so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement specific image is completed. Even during the period, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag.

In the above-mentioned modification 006SG-7, a parallax barrier type naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'using a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, a lenticular lens system or an integral imaging system other than the parallax barrier system may be used to display a stereoscopic image (3D image).

In the present modification 006SG0-7, a mode in which the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stereoscopic view is also performed in the development suggestion effect. A case may be provided in which an image (3D image) is displayed. When displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) even in the exhibition suggestion effect, the stereoscopic image (3D image) image (right eye image and left eye image) is drawn, and the planar view image (2D image) is drawn. It may be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area) higher than the image drawing area to be arranged. By doing so, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the planar image (2D image), so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is preferably displayed in the development suggestion effect. can do.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-7, as an effect of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image), a variable display advance notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit is different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Although the form that can be executed in a period is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the introduction effect of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is performed in the period before the development suggestion effect (specific effect). A stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is executed by displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), so that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) can be performed. The production effect of can be further improved. Furthermore, a plurality of production modes of the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect) are provided, and the effect mode of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is determined according to which effect mode the introduction effect is executed. It may be different.

Further, in the introduction effect, the movable body 32 is operated, and the operation of the movable body 32 and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are linked to produce the effect of the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect). May be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 14-46 as a modified example 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (first interface image 006SG005I or second interface in the feature unit 006SG). (Corresponding to image 006SG005J), the payout display of medals, the display of the number of remaining games of AT (assist time), the medal display stored as credits, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 together with the effect image, and these game-related information is displayed. It may be a non-target image of displacement.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, as a specific effect of the present invention, an effect of changing or distorting (distorting) the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a specific effect, a change or distortion of the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be repeatedly executed.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, development suggestion effect, reach suggestion effect, revival effect, look-ahead notice effect, promotion effect, temporary stop suggestion effect, and temporary stop notification effect are exemplified as specific effects in the present invention. As these specific effects, a plurality of effects may be executed. In the case where a plurality of specific effects can be executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern (character and number) is not divided, such as a development suggestion effect, in the normal state. On the other hand, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern (only numbers) is divided into a plurality of fragments or display areas, such as a revival effect or a look-ahead notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the specific effect due to the fact that the decorative pattern including the character and the number is not divided in the normal state, and conversely, in the time saving state, the decorative pattern containing only the number is displayed. By dividing, the effect of a specific effect can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, an embodiment in which the decorative design is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state and the decorative design is composed only of numbers in the time saving state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode of the decorative symbol may be changed from the middle of the variable display in a specific variable pattern such as the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach. For example, in the variable display of Super Reach, the variable display of the decorative symbol composed of characters and numbers is executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and the decorative symbol composed of only the numbers is executed in the period after the reach. The variable display of is performed. Further, in the period after the reach, as the specific effect in the present invention, it is sufficient to enable the effect of dividing the decorative pattern such as the revival effect.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, an image in which at least a part of the specific image in the present invention is displaced in the left-right direction or the up-down direction is displayed as a displacement specific image on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a part of a specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. That is, the displacement direction of the image in the present invention may include the enlargement / reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4, in the displacement target image, the R value and the G value of the displacement target image correspond to the R value and the G value of the displacement image from the position corresponding to the pixel A. An embodiment in which a displacement image is generated in a replacement method in which a pixel X is specified and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) at a position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, for example, in the displacement target image, the displacement image is moved by a method (movement method) in which the pixel X at the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image is moved to the position corresponding to the R value and the G value of the pixel A. It may be generated. In the replacement method, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the region close to the boundary portion to the displacement image considering the width of the boundary portion of the region having a different movement direction as in the modified example 006SG-3. On the other hand, in the case of the replacement method, since it is not necessary to edit these, the load of creating an image can be reduced, and when an effect image or the like is placed at the boundary, the boundary where the effect image is placed is set. Since the degree of freedom can be increased, the load of creating images including effect images can be reduced.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
A variable winning means that can change the first state in which the game medium is easy to win and the second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state.
Equipped with
The display means is
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and a display image of game-related information regarding the progress of the game can be displayed in the display area.
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means.
When the first round game is performed among the plurality of round games, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. ,
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period.
When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, after the predetermined period elapses, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display without displaying the predetermined display.
Moreover,
A storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information, and a storage means.
An image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers. ,
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area,
Equipped with
The storage means can store display position displacement information for shifting a display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position to a second position different from the first position.
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information.
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images